Samsung | SAMSUNG EX2F | Samsung SMART CAMERA EX2F صارف گائیڈ

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫‪EX2F‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻄﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ— ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ )ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ( ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﺩﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﺩﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻠﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ ﺟﺪی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﺮﺳﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ ﺍﺟﺰﺍی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺧﻴﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺘﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻟﺒﺎﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻭ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻘﺎﺗﯽ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺗﮑﻨﻮﻟﻮژی ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍی ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ١۵‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮی ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺸﮑﻮک ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﭘﺰﺷﮑﯽ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻠﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺰﺷﮑﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻋﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺷﻮک ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Samsung‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺮﻭی‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﮐﻨﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﭘﺰﺷﮑﯽ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﭘﺰﺷﮑﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﮐﻨﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ — ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﯽ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ‪ AC‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ‪ ،AC‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﺖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﮔﯽ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺪی ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺯﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﺩی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ Samsung‬ﺑﺎﺑﺖ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻘﺎﺻﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺎﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ‪ AC‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ +‬ﻭ ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ )‪ (RF‬ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﺳﻤﻌﮏ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺰﺷﮑﯽ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭﻫﺎ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﻊ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎک ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﮔﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﮑﺴﺘﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﮐﺮﻳﻠﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ Samsung Electronics‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﺖ ﻣﻌﻨﻮی ﻳﺎ ﻋﻔﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻘﺾ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺡ ﮐﻠﯽ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﭽﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Microsoft Windows‬ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪Microsoft‬‬
‫‪ Corporation‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Mac‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ Apple Corporation‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫™‪ microSDXC™ ،microSDHC™ ،microSD‬ﻋﻼﻳﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ‬
‫‪ SD‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،HDMI‬ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ "‪– High‬‬
‫‪،"Definition Multimedia Interface‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ HDMI Licensing LLC‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫®‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ ،Wi-Fi CERTIFIED‬ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ Wi-Fi Alliance‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻳﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﭽﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺎﻟﮑﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺻﺎﺣﺒﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪١۴‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫‪۴٠‬‬
‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫‪۶۴‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫‪٩۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HDTV‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮐﺸﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﭘﺬﻳﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢۶‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ )‪ WLAN‬ﻫﺎ( ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١۴٨‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﮐﺴﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪١۵۴‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪Magic Plus‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪v‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫] [‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫) (‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬
‫←‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ؛ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ← ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫)ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩی ﺩﺭ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ g‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﻪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼً‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ )ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ(‬
‫• ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫• ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻋﺎﺩی‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫• ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ :‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺷﯽء‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫• ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‪ :‬ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ )ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺭﺥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻌﮑﺲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶٨‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﺎ‬
‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٠٩‬‬
‫ﻟﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻔﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﭘﺮ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧١‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎﺭی ﺭﺥ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣٨‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻼﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﮐﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺎﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ← ﺷﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ g‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٨‬‬
‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶٩‬‬
‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧١‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺮﺯﻳﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ← ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ g‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٨‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶٩‬‬
‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی‬
‫• ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨٢‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨۴‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺍﮐﺸﻦ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ < g‬ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ < ﻋﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ < g‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ < ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ ‪۴٩‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ < g‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪۵۵‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪/‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫)ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﻳﺰی ﻳﺎ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ( ‪۶٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ < g‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ < ﺷﺐ‪ ،‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻃﻠﻮﻉ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‬
‫‪۴٨‬‬
‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻼﺵ ‪۶٨‬‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪) ISO‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ( ‪٧١‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪۵٧ g > HDR‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪) ISO‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪) EV‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ( ‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ‪٨۴‬‬
‫‪٨٨ WB BKT‬‬
‫‪٨٨ AE BKT‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪۴٨‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﺸﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﮔﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪۴٨‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ < g‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ < ﻋﮑﺲ ‪۵٠ 3D‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ < g‬ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ < ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫• ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ < g‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ ‪۵٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ < g‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪Split‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ < g‬ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮی ﻫﻨﺮی ‪۵۶‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪ ,‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‪ ,‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ( ‪٩٣‬‬
‫‪۵۴‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ < g‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ < ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ < g‬ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ‪۵٠‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺍﮐﺸﻦ‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ < g‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ < ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫• ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪۵٢‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ )ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ(‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪۴۶ h‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫• ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‬
‫‪۵٠‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ‪١٠۴‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩی ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ HDTV‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ‪١١٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ‪١١۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ ‪١٣۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ‪١٣٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ‪١۵٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪١۵٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪١۵٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪١۵١‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪١٧٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‪۴٠ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪۴١ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪۴٣ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ‪۴۴ .....................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ‪۴۵ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪۴۶ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ‪۴٧ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪۴٨ ..................................................... Magic Plus‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪۴٨ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ ‪۴٩ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪۵٠ ....................................................... 3D‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎی ‪ ٢‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﻳﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ‪۵٠ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﮐﺸﻦ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ‪۵٢ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ ‪۵٣ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵۴ ............................................. Split‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪-‬ﺩﺭ‪-‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪۵۵ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮی ﻫﻨﺮی ‪۵۶ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪۵٧ ............................................................ HDR‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺧﻼﻕ ‪۵٨ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪۶٠ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪۶٢ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪۶٣ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‪١۴ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ‪١۵ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١۶ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪١٩ ................................................... Smart Link‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪٢٠ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻨﺪ ‪٢٠ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ ‪٢١ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪٢٢ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪٢٣ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ‪٢٣ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪٢٣ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢۴ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ‪٢۶ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪٢٧ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪٢٧ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪٢٧ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ‪٢٩ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪٢٩ .............................................................. [MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪٣١ ..................................................................... [Fn‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪٣٢ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪٣٢ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪٣٣ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪٣۴ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪٣۵ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪٣٧ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ‪٣٨ ..........................................‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶۴ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ‪۶۵ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ‪۶۵ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪۶۶ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪۶٧ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ ‪۶٨ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪۶٨ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪۶٨ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪۶٩ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪٧١ .............................................................. ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪٧٢ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ ‪٧٢ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ‪٧٢ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏﺷﺪﻩ ‪٧۴ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ‪٧۵ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ‪٧۶ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪.............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ‪...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪........................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ‪..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ‪.................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪................................................‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻫﺎ )‪.......................... (My Star‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ‪............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ )‪......................................... (EV‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ‪..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ‪..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ‪..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ‪..........................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ‪..............................................‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪.............................................‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪.......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ‪................................................................. ND‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ‪..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﮐﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻭﻡ ‪...................................................................‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫‪٨۴‬‬
‫‪٨۴‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫‪٩٣‬‬
‫‪٩۴‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٩۵ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٩۶ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٩۶ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ‪١٠٢ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪١٠۵ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪١٠٧ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ‪١٠٧ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪١٠٧ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪١٠٨ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ‪١٠٩ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ )‪١١٠ ................................................. (DPOF‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩی‪ HDTV ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ‪١١٢ ........‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ‪١١۵ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪١١۵ ................... Windows‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪١١۶ .......................... MAC‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ‪١١٧ ................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺳﯽ ﺩی ‪١١٧ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪١١٨ ......................................................... iLauncher‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪١٢١ .............................. Samsung RAW Converter‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‪١٢۶ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻭ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ‪١٢٧ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪١٢٧ ......................................................... WLAN‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ‪١٢٩ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ‪١٢٩ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪١٣٠ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪١٣٢ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻫﺎﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪١٣٣ ...............‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ ‪١٣۵ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ‪١٣۵ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪١٣۵ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ‪١٣٧ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ‪١٣٧ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ‪١٣٩ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﺑﺮی ‪١۴٠ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Auto Backup‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪١۴١ .......................‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ‪ Auto Backup‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ‪١۴١ ......‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ‪١۴١ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‬
‫‪١۴٣ ............................................................................. TV Link‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪١۴۵ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪۶۴١ ................................... (WOL) Wake on LAN‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪١۴٨ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪١۴٩ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪١۴٩ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪١۵٠ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۵۴ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ ‪١۵۵ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١۵٧ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١۵٧ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١۵٨ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪١۶٠ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ‪١۶٣ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ‪١۶٧ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ‪١۶٧ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ‪١۶٧ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻫﺎﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪١۶٨ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪١۶٨ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ‪١۶٩ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪١٧٠ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١٧٣ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ‪١٧٨ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻣﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﻤﯽ ‪١٨۴ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪١٨۶ .................................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫……………………………… ‪١۵‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ……………………………… ‪١۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪Smart Link‬‬
‫………………… ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫…………………………… ‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ………………………… ‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ……………………… ‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ………………………… ‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ …………………………… ‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻨﺪ ………………………………… ‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪٢٩ …………………………… [MENU‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ ………………………… ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪٣١ ………………………………… [Fn‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ …………………… ‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ………………………… ‪٣٢‬‬
‫………… ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ …………………………………… ‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ …………………………… ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ …………………………………… ‪٣۴‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫…………………………… ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ …………………………………… ‪٢۴‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ …………………………………… ‪٢۶‬‬
‫……………………………… ‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫…………………………………… ‪٣۵‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ …………………………… ‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ …………… ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‪/‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ‪/‬ﺑﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫• ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﮐﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Samsung‬ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Samsung‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﺭی‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﮐﻴﻒ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪/‬ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١۵‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪/HDMI‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪A / V‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻫﺎﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٩‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٨‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٢٠‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪/AF‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺥ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ*‬
‫* ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١۶‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﮐﻔﺸﮏ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﮐﻔﺸﮏ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ :‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫• ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﻥ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯی ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﮑﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ‪ WLAN‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫• ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻭ ‪A/V‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ A/V‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٨‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻳﺎﺑﯽ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ‬
‫‪ D‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ c‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ F‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪:Smart Link‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻳﺎﺑﯽ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ :‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ :‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺠﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪ :Magic Plus‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪v‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١٨‬‬
‫‪ :Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪Smart Link‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﺎ ]ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ[ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ‪ ٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪] ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﮐﺮﻭﺷﻪ‪،‬‬
‫• ‪ ٣‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ ٣‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪Smart Link‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﻴﺎﭘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ]ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ[‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← n‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ )ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ (Wi-Fi‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١۵٢‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﮕﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻭ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﻤﻞ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫!‬
‫‪8 0‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫‪١٨٠‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻤﯽ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ,‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻃﻼﻳﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ Samsung‬ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ AC‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫• ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫• ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ :‬ﮐﺎﻣ ً‬
‫• ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﻥ‪ :‬ﺧﻄﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٢۴‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [P‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪ AC‬ﻭ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎی‬
‫‪) AC‬ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ‪ (SAC-48‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ]‪ ،[P‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫]‪ [c‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [t‬ﻳﺎ ]‪[o‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [c/D‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺳﻔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫]‪ [t/F‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪[o‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﺴﺘﺎﻧﯽ‪ [D] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ‪ :‬ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻬﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫]‪ [c‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫]‪ [t‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t/F‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ]‪ [c/D‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫]‪ [c‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [t‬ﻳﺎ ]‪[o‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [c/D‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫]‪ [c‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [t‬ﻳﺎ ]‪[o‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [c/D‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢۵‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ‪ ND‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی )ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی )ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﮐﺎﻣ ً‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻟﯽ )ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪ :‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪ*‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ(‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(OIS‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢۶‬‬
‫* ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<Magic Plus‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ‬
‫ﯽ‬
‫ﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻳﻢ ﺟﺎﺩﻭ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻓﺮ ﻢ‬
‫‪Split‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺧﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪HDR‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٨‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٠‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻗﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٣‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪ :Split‬ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵۴‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵۵‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮی ﻫﻨﺮی‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮐﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵۶‬‬
‫‪ :HDR‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺍی‬
‫ﺗﺎﮐﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺧﻼﻕ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٨‬‬
‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮی ﻫﻨﺮی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﺎﺭی‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫]‪ [t/F/c/D‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫>‪<Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪ :MobileLink‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٣٢‬‬
‫‪ :Remote Viewfinder‬ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬
‫ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٣۵‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺮ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﺑﺮی ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١۴٠‬‬
‫‪ :Auto Backup‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١۴١‬‬
‫‪ :TV Link‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١۴٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ [m] ،‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [f‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪[MENU‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ]‪ [t/F/c/D‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫]‪ [t/F/c/D‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼً‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ p‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ]‪ [c/D‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [t‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ]‪ [t/F‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ]‪ [c/D‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫‪ a‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [t‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪[Fn‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [f‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ]‪ [t/F/c/D‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼً‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ p‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [f‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺥ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ‪ :‬ﺍﺑﺮی‬
‫‪٠ : EV‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫]‪ [t/F‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫• ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺎﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪/‬ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻭﺝ ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻭﺝ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻭﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻭﺝ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺭ ]‪ [D‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﮑﺮﺭﺍً ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﮐﻢ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺨﻔﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪/‬ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Magic plus‬ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﮑﺮﺭﺍً ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪Home‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ S‬ﻣﺜﻼً‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪← n‬ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ← ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺪﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ T‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ [P] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ [l] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪/‬ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [P] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٣٨‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٣۴‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫‪gMhAp‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪/‬ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی ‪ ٣/٣‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٣/٢‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ )ﺯﻭﻡ( ﻧﻮﺭی‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ )ﺯﻭﻡ( ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫• ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٣۵‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫‪MhAp‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪ ۴/۴‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺖ ﮐﻤﺘﺮی ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٣٫٢‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ‪ +‬ﺑﺮﺩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← a‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ :‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ :‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٣۶‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪vgMhAp‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫؟ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫؟ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ← V‬ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :OIS‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :DUAL IS‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻭ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٣٧‬‬
‫• ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﻣﺜﻼً‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﺎﻧﻪ(‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬‫• ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺛﺮ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﻮﺭی‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫»ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ« ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭼﻴﺰی ﺟﻠﻮی ﻟﻨﺰ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶٩‬‬
‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧١‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬‫)ﻣﺜﻼً‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻟﺒﺎﺱ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻕ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺎﺏ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻃﺮﺡ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﮐﺮﻩ‬‫‪ -‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶٩‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫………………… ‪۴١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎی ‪ ٢‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﻳﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ……… ‪۵٠‬‬
‫…………………………… ‪۴٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﮐﺸﻦ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ …………………… ‪۵٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ……………………………………………… ‪۴۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ……………… ‪۴۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ …………………… ‪۴۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫………………… ‪۴٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪۴٨ …………………… Magic Plus‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ………………………… ‪۴٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫…………………… ‪۴٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪۵٠ ……………………… 3D‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ …………………… ‪۵٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵۴ ……………… Split‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪-‬ﺩﺭ‪-‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ……………… ‪۵۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮی ﻫﻨﺮی‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪۵٧ ………………………… HDR‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺧﻼﻕ …………………… ‪۵٨‬‬
‫………………… ‪۵۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫……………………………… ‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ……………………… ‪۶٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫………… ‪۶٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ T‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻏﺮﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﻨﮕﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﺎﺯی )ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ(‬
‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ )ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﭘﺮﺗﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۴١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ T‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻧﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،T‬ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۴٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ p‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ "ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶۴‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۴٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﺍی ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﺯک ﻓﻠﺰی ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻭ ﺗﻨﮓ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ؛‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﺘﺮ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ‪ 5.6‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ‪ 11‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﻋﺎﻣﻠﯽ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﯽﮐﺸﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻭی‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺭی ﻣﻴﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﮐﻤﺘﺮی ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﮐﻢ‬
‫)ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺍﺳﺖ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫)ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮐﻢ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۴۴‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﻮﺭﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ A‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۴۴‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ”ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی“ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶۴‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ← ISO ← a‬ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۴۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﻮﺭﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ h‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺥ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۴۴‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ”ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی“ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶۴‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ← ISO ← a‬ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۴۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ M‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺥ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ”ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی“ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶۴‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۴٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪Magic Plus‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،Magic Plus‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﭙﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﺑﯽ ﺟﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﭼﺎپ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﯽ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎی ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻭ ﺯﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ g‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻠﻮﻉ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻃﻠﻮﻉ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺗﺎﺑﻴﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ [o] ،‬ﻳﺎ ]‪← g ← [m‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ‪3D‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫‪Home‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺐ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﮐﻢ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻑ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ )ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﻗﺺ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۴٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪Magic Plus‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮی‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺜﻼً‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ g‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪FR‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ ← a‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺜﻼً‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﮥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ FR‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۴٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪Magic Plus‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪3D‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎی ‪ ٢‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﻳﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ ،3D‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺟﺎی‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ g‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ 3D‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ٢ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ ‪ MPO‬ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ ،3D‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ ،3D‬ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ MPO‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ MPO‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ‪ JPEG‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ MPO‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ g‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← a‬ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ← ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎی ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﯽ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﯽ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۵٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪Magic Plus‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎی ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۵١‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﻭﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬‫ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺪک ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪی‬‫ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎی ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻨﻈﻢ‬‫ ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬‫ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ‬‫ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬‫ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﯽ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﮐﯽ ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪Magic Plus‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎی ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﮐﯽ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺛﺒﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎی‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ ﻫﻢ ‪MPO‬‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ MPO‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ MPO‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ‪ JPEG‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ MPO‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﮐﺸﻦ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﮐﺸﻦ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ g‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← a‬ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ← ﻋﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﯽ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﯽ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۵٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪Magic Plus‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﻭﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬‫ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺪک ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪی‬‫ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎی ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻨﻈﻢ‬‫ ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬‫ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ‬‫ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬‫ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ g‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﺷﻰ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻯ‬
‫‪Home‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۵٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪Magic Plus‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪Split‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪ Split‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ g‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ۴‬ﻭ ‪ ۵‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ [l] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺳﺒﮏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺧﻂ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫‪ ← a‬ﺗﺎﺭی ﺧﻂ ← ﻳﮏ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪← a‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ← ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻫﺮ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Home‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۵۴‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪ ،Split‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪ ،Split‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪Magic Plus‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪-‬ﺩﺭ‪-‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪-‬ﺩﺭ‪-‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ g‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻳﮏ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ← V‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ← ﻳﮏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫]‪ [t/F/c/D‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺥ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪،‬‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪،‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪،‬‬
‫]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ← a‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎی ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۵۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪Magic Plus‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪-‬ﺩﺭ‪-‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺮﮐﺐ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎی ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺮﮐﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻳﮏ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺮﮐﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭼﺮﺧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺭﺝ‪ ١/۴ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭﺝ‪ ٢٠ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪-‬ﺩﺭ‪-‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎی‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺳﻴﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮی ﻫﻨﺮی‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮی ﻫﻨﺮی‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ g‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪Home‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۵۶‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻣﻴﺰی ﺁﺑﺮﻧﮓ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻣﻴﺰی ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻮﻧﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻣﺪﺍﺩی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪Magic Plus‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪HDR‬‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) HDR‬ﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﮏ ﺑﺎﻻ( ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻣﻼﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻏﻨﯽ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮی ﻫﻨﺮی‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮی ﻫﻨﺮی‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮی ﻫﻨﺮی‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎی‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ "ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮی ﻫﻨﺮی"‪ ،‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮی ﻫﻨﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪HDR‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪HDR‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ g‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۵٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪Magic Plus‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ HDR‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ HDR‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ HDR‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺑﺒﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ HDR‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ HDR‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﭘﺲ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٣‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺯﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺧﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺧﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺧﻼﻕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ g‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ +‬ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺴﺎﺯ ﺧﻼﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ RAW‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻫﺎی ‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ JPEG‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺧﻼﻕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ۶٠‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ‪ ١٠‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [f‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۵٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪Magic Plus‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻀﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٠١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﺪﺭ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻧﺪﺭ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺧﻼﻕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ g‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [c/D‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۵٩‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [P] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٩۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢﻫﺎی ‪ HD‬ﮐﺎﻣﻞ )‪ (1920 X 1080‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی )‪ MP4 (H.264‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫)‪ MP4 (H.264‬ﻳﮏ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩﺳﺎﺯی ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮی ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﻦﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ‪ ISO-IEC‬ﻭ ‪ ITU-T‬ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٩۴‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ v‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ "ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۶٠‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪ ،v‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ٣‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮐﺎﺭی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﮑﺚ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ )ﺗﺎ ‪ ۶‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ [c‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﭼﺎپ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۶١‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ v‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ v‬ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪ 480) 192 X 144‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪ ۴٨٠ :‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫)ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ 240) 384 X 288‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪ ٢۴٠ :‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫)ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ 120) 640 X 480‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪ ١٢٠ :‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫)ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۶٢‬‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻏﺮﻭﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ v‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﻨﮕﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ ← V‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ← ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۶٣‬‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ …………………………… ‪۶۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ………………… ‪٧٩‬‬
‫…………………………… ‪۶۵‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫)‪٨٠ …………………………………… (My Star‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ……………… ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ …………………………… ‪۶٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ …………………………… ‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ……………………………… ‪۶۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ …………………………………… ‪۶٧‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫……………………… ‪۶٨‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ …………………………… ‪۶٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ………………………………… ‪۶٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪٧١ …………………………… ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ……………………………… ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ‬
‫……………………………… ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ……………………… ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﻓﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏﺷﺪﻩ …………… ‪٧۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ………………… ‪٧۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ )‪٨٢ …………… (EV‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ………………………… ‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ …………………………… ‪٨۴‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫………………… ‪٨۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ………………………… ‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ……………… ‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ……………… ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ …………………… ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ……………………… ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ …………………………… ‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ‪٩٢ ……………………………… ND‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ …………………………… ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ …………………………………… ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ……………………………… ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ……………………… ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ …………………………… ‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ……………………………… ‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﮐﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻭﻡ ……………………………… ‪٩۴‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪ :1920 X 1080‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A5‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ‬
‫)‪ (١۶:٩‬ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪.HD‬‬
‫‪ :1024 X 768‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪gMhApT‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ ← a‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪ :4000 X 3000‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪.A1‬‬
‫‪ :4000 X 2672‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A2‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ )‪.(٣:٢‬‬
‫‪ :4000 X 2248‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A2‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ )‪ (١۶:٩‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HD‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪vgMhApT‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← V‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫‪ :3264 X 2448‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪.A2‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪ :1920X1080‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ‪ HD‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪.HD‬‬
‫‪ :1280X720‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ‪ HD‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪.HD‬‬
‫‪ :2832 X 2832‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A3‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ‪.١:١‬‬
‫‪ :640X480‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ‪ SD‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :2592 X 1944‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪.A4‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ :1984 X 1488‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A5‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶۵‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ RAW‬ﭼﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ؟‬
‫‪gMhAp‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ‪ JPEG‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ‪ JPEG‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ‪ JPEG‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی‬
‫‪ RAW‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ”‪ “SRW‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ )ﻣﺜﻼ‪.(“SAM_0001.SRW”:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ ،‬ﺗﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ ،RAW‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Samsung RAW Converter‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﻧﺮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ١٢١‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ ← a‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :RAW‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ + RAW‬ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫‪ RAW‬ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ + RAW‬ﺧﻮﺏ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ + RAW‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‪ ,‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ,‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ‪ RAW‬ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ RAW‬ﺭﻭی ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫‪vgMhApT‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی‬
‫▲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ‪ ٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍی‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫▲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍی‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪/AF‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎی ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶٧‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪gp‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﺩﺭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻭی‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ”ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ“ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ‪ ،‬ﺁﺯﺍﺩﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺴﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶٨‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪gMhApT‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ‪ ،‬ﺁﺯﺍﺩﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [F] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ :‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪ :‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺯﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﮑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺯﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﮑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶٩‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٧۴‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﯽ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻳﺰی ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ]‪ [m‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ ← a‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ]‪ [t/F‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ :‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫‪-2‬‬
‫‪+2‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻋﮑﺲﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺪﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [F] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [D‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧٠‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬‫ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮐﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬‫• ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪MhAp‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﺳﺎﺯی )‪ (ISO‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺳﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ‪ ISO 12800‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← a‬ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ‪ ← ISO‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ‪ ،ISO 12800‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪ ISO ← a‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫‪vgMhAp‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﮔﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺸﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪gMhAp‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [c] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ‪ :‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ )ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻌﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ )ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ(‪ :‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧٣‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‪ :‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ۴٠ .‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﻢ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪gMhAp‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [c] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [D‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ]‪ [t/F‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ‪ :‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻓﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪gMhAp‬‬
‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← a‬ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ← ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ]‪ [t/F/c/D‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧۴‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺗﮑﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪gMhAp‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺣﺘﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← a‬ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ← ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻘﻴﺐ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧۵‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ‬‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻃﺮﺡ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﮐﺮﻩ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺷﺪﻳﺪی ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﮏ‬
‫ﺧﻄﯽ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﮏ ﺧﻄﯽ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺗﮑﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫‪gMhAp‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺟﺎی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← a‬ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻣﺮﮐﺰی‪ :‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ )ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪ :‬ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٩‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﮥ‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪ :‬ﺭﻭی ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧۴‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ‪ :‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻭ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺷﯽء‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧۵‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫‪gMhAp‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﺸﻤﻬﺎی ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﺘﺒﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻮﻕ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← a‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ← ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← a‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ← ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭی ﺷﻤﺎﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﺎﮐﺴﺘﺮی‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩﻫﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻳﺪ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← a‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ← ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١۵٠‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺮی ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ‪ ٢‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← a‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ← ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← a‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ← ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫)ﺑﺮﺍی ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭی‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺭ ژﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﮏ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٢‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ ١٢‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻫﺎ )‪(My Star‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫• ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← a‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪ My Star ← FR‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺑﻴﻀﯽ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٨‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺭﺗﺒﻪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ‪ ۵‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻧﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← a‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪ ← FR‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [f‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺗﺒﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t/F‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺭﺗﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [f‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ "ﺭﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻗﻪ" ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٩٧‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ ← a‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪ ← FR‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫]‪ [f‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [l‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ "ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ" ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٩٨‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦﺗﺎﻥ ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻘﻴﺐ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﺮﺍی »ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ« ﻭ‬‫»ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ« ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻓﻀﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻋﻴﻨﮏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﺳﮏ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬‫ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪ AF ،‬ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ AF‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ‪ AF‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (٩٧‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ )‪(EV‬‬
‫‪vhAp‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪EV : 1‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺗﺮ )‪(-‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺧﻨﺜﯽ )‪(0‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ )‪(+‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﺪﺍً ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪) AE BKT‬ﮐﺮﻭﺷﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (٨٩‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺮﻭﺷﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﻴﺎﭘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﮐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨٨‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﻳﺎ ‪ EV ← V‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪VhAp‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ]‪ [L‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ]‪ [L‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺥ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺥ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨٢‬‬
‫]‪ [L‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ‪ AEL‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫‪gvMhAp‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﻤﻴﺖ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪vMhAp‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭی‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺮی ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ← V‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی‪:‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰی‪:‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺶ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﮐﻞ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺄﮐﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫ﺍﺑﺮی‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٨۴‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪۀ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ← V‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭی ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺮی‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﺑﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ :H-‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺳﻪ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ :L-‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻻﻣﭗ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﭘﺮﻧﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺎﻟﻮژﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﮐﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨۶‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ← V‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [D‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ]‪ [t/F/c/D‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨۶‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :G‬ﺳﺒﺰ‬
‫‪ :A‬ﮐﻬﺮﺑﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫‪ :M‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪ :B‬ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٨۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﮑﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﮐﺎﻏﺬ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ← V‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ← V‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [D‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫]‪ [t/F‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ )ﻗﺮﻣﺰی‪ /‬ﺯﺭﺩی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ( ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮔﺮﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ‬
‫)ﺁﺑﯽ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ( ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺳﺮﺩﺗﺮی ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ‪ :‬ﺩﻣﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٨۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬
‫‪MhAp‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭ ژﺳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﮑﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺳﺨﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ )‪ 5‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪ :‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ‪ ۵‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ )‪ 10‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪ :‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ‪ ١٠‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﮑﯽ‪ :‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﭘﺮﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ )‪ 3‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪ :‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ‪ ٣‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٨٧‬‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺁﻳﯽ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﮐﺮﻭﺷﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ‪ ٩‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٩‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ‪ ٣‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ‪ ١٠‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺼﻔﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﮐﺮﻭﺷﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← a‬ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﮐﺮﻭﺷﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪ ٣ :WB BKT‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣ :AE BKT‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی( ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫‪gvMhAp‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻠﻖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩی‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ← V‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﮐﺠﯽ‪-‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻨﯽ ﻗﻮی‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ‪ Lomo‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻣﻴﺰی ﺁﺑﺮﻧﮓ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﺷﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻣﻴﺰی ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻮﻧﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭی‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻃﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﺼﺮی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻣﺪﺍﺩی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻧﺮﻡ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﻳﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺑﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻳﮏ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻼﺳﻴﮏ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻭ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻼﺳﻴﮏ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﮐﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺮﮐﺰﻳﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺗﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻭ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩی‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻭ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی ﻣﻼﻳﻢ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪۴‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﮏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﮐﺠﯽ‪-‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻨﯽ ﻗﻮی‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ‪ Lomo‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻣﺪﺍﺩی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺑﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻳﮏ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٩١‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻫﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ‪ND‬‬
‫‪vgMhApT‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ )‪ ND (Neutral Density‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ‪ ND‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ← V‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ‪ ND‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ‪ ND‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ‪ ND‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪MhAp‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪ ← a‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫]‪ [t/F‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫• ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫• ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺍی ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ 0 ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﮐﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫‪vgMhAp‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← v‬ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ‪ :Sound Alive‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ Sound Alive‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ‪ :Sound Alive‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ :‬ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﺪﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٩۴‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HDTV‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ………………… ‪٩۶‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩی‪HDTV ،‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ……………………………… ‪٩۶‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ……………………………… ‪١١٢‬‬
‫……………………………… ‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ……………………………………… ‪١٠۵‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ……………………………… ‪١١۵‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ………………………………… ‪١٠٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪١١۵ …………………………………… Windows‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪١١۶ … MAC‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ………………………………… ‪١٠٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ …………………… ‪١١٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ …………………………… ‪١٠٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ …………………… ‪١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ………………………………… ‪١٠٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ )‪١١٠ …………………… (DPOF‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺳﯽ ﺩی ……… ‪١١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪١١٨ ………………………… iLauncher‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪١٢١ …… Samsung RAW Converter‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [P‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]‪ [t/F‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺦ‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t/F‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺪﺧﻮﺍﻥ )ﮐﺪک( ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺎﺭی‪/‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪ -‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٩٨‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ [D] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٩۶‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺭﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫‪ ← O‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ← ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺗﺒﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺗﺒﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺎﺭی‪/‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪ -‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪V‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t/F‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺭﺗﺒﻪ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [f‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺴﺎﺯ ﺧﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ [D] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← O‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ← ﻣﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ]‪ [t/F‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [l‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﺗﮏ ﻧﻤﺎ‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]‪ [t/F‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪] ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t/F‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ←ﻳﮏ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻔﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻧﻔﺮ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ)‪ (Wi-Fi‬ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻫﻔﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]‪ [t/F‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ )‪ ٣‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ(‪] ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪] .‬ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی‬
‫)‪ ١۵‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‪] ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← O‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ← ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ← ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻐﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ]‪ [t/F/c/D‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫]‪ [l‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [f‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ]‪ [L‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﭘﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﮑﯽ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [l‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ [l] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‪ [l] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺩﺭﻭﻥ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [l‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [l] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪ ،[m‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ ← O‬ﺣﺬﻑ ←‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻐﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١٠١‬‬
‫]‪ [l‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← O‬ﺣﺬﻑ ← ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ‪،‬‬
‫]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪] .‬ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫)ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺵ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫]‪ [t/F/c/D‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ]‪ [t/F‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﻞ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎی ﺍﻓﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﺩی‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ [t/F/c/D] ،‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﺒﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪی ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١١۴‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١٠٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻓﮑﺖ‬
‫• ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺁﺭﺍﻡ*‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺧﺸﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﺳﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺩﺍﺏ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮﻳﻦ(‬
‫• ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ ٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‬
‫‪ ۴‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫)ﭘﺨﺶ*‪ ،‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ(‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻤﻪ*‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ*‪ 3 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ 5 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ 10 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻓﮑﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١٠۴‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ← ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [t/F‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‪] ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺵ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﭙﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‪/‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫]‪ [F‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ]‪،[F‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪.X٨ ،X۴ ،X٢‬‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ]‪،[t‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪.X٨ ،X۴ ،X٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١٠۵‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫]‪ [c‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١٠۶‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ 3D‬ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ‪ RAW‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪[m‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ← e‬ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪[m‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ← e‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ‪ :‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ˚‪90‬‬
‫‪2592 X 1944‬‬
‫‪1984 X 1488‬‬
‫‪1024 X 768‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﻮﻳﺴﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١٠٧‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻣﻴﺰی ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻮﻧﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪[m‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭی‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻃﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﺼﺮی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻣﺪﺍﺩی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ← e‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻧﺮﻡ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺩی‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩی‬
‫ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﮐﺠﯽ‪-‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻨﯽ ﻗﻮی‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ‪ Lomo‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻣﻴﺰی ﺁﺑﺮﻧﮓ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﺷﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻼﺳﻴﮏ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻭ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﮐﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺮﮐﺰﻳﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﻳﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺑﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١٠٨‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭﻟﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪[m‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ← e‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪[m‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪ ← e‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [D‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]‪ [t/F‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١٠٩‬‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪[m‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪[m‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ← e‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ← e‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ )‪ (DPOF‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﭼﺎپ ﺩﺭ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪ ،MISC‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪ DPOF‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [D‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t/F‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← DPOF ← O‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ← ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎ‪] ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [f‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [c/D‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← DPOF ← O‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ← ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭼﺎپ‪،‬‬
‫]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [f‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [c/D‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١١١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← DPOF ← O‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻐﺎﺯﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪) DPOF‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ( ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ ،DPOF‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﻨﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﺎپ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ‪ DPOF 1.1‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩی‪ HDTV ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪) A/V‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← n‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١۵٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،A/V‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ A/V‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١١٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩی‪ HDTV ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪HDTV‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﻭ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HDTV‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) HDMI .‬ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﻻ( ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ‪ HDTV‬ﻫﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← n‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ HDMI‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١۵٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ‪ HDTV‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ Samsung HDTV‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HD‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ‪ HDTV‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ‪ HDTV‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ )‪ Anynet+(CEC‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯﺭﺍﻩﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ Anynet+ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (١۵٢‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ‪Samsung‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﯽﮐﺸﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ‪ HDTV‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﻟﺰﻭﻣﺎً ﻣﻨﺠﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ‪ HDMI‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ‪ HDMI‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ HDTV‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١١٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩی‪ HDTV ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ 3D‬ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎی ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← n‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ HDMI‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١۵٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ‪ HDMI‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [c‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ 3D‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ [c‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ 2D‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ‪ Anynet+‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ MPO‬ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ MPO‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﻴﻨﮏ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﭙﺮﻫﻴﺰﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﺭﺽ ﻧﺎﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺧﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﺧﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺟﺴﻤﯽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻬﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺳﺮﮔﻴﺠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١١۴‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪Windows‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ ،Windows Vista ،Windows XP‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ Windows 7‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪Removable Disk ← My Computer ،‬‬
‫‪100PHOTO ← DCIM‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫←‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪(Windows XP‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎی ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١١۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪MAC‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Mac OS 10.5‬ﻳﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﺻﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١١۶‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺟﺪﺍﺷﺪﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺳﯽ ﺩی‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺳﯽ ﺩی‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪iLauncher‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪PC Auto Backup‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ‪) Exit‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ( ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Samsung RAW‬‬
‫‪Converter‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١١٧‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ‪ Multimedia Viewer‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪PC‬‬
‫‪ Auto Backup‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ RAW‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫هنایار یور یاه همانرب زا هدافتسا‬
‫استفاده از ‪iLauncher‬‬
‫ •این الزامات فقط توصیه شده هستند‪ .‬بسته به وضعيت رايانه شما‪ ،‬حتی با برآورده ‬
‫شدن اين الزامات‪ ،‬ممکن است عملکرد ‪ iLauncher‬با اختالل روبرو شود‪.‬‬
‫ •اگر رایانه شما نیازمندی ها را ندارد‪ ،‬ممكن است فیلم ها درست پخش نشوند‪.‬‬
‫‪ iLauncher‬به شما امکان می دهد فایل ها را با ‪ Multimedia Viewer‬پخش ‬
‫کرده و یک پیوند برای دانلود برنامه ‪ ‎PC Auto Backup‬به شما ارائه می کند‪.‬‬
‫الزامات سیستم عامل ویندوز‬
‫گزينه‬
‫سی پی یو‬
‫رم‬
‫سازنده‪ ،‬در قبال آسيبهای ناشی از به کار گيری رايانه های نامناسب‪ ،‬مانند رايانه هايی که ‬
‫شخصاً مونتاژ کرده ايد‪ ،‬هيچگونه مسئوليتی ندارد‪.‬‬
‫نيازمندی ها‬
‫‪ Intel® Core™ 2 Duo‬یا ‪ 1/66 GHz‬باالتر‪/‬‬
‫‪ AMD Athlon X2 Dual-Core‬یا ‪ 2/2 GHz‬باالتر ‬
‫حداقل ‪ 512‬مگابایت ‪RAM‬‬
‫(‪ 1‬گیگابایت و باالتر توصیه می شود)‬
‫الزامات سیستم عامل مکینتاش‬
‫گزينه‬
‫نيازمندی ها‬
‫‪ Mac OS 10.5‬یا جدیدتر (به جز ‪)PowerPC‬‬
‫سیستم عامل*‬
‫‪ ،Windows Vista ،Windows XP SP2‬يا ‪Windows 7‬‬
‫ظرفیت هارد‬
‫دیسک‬
‫سیستم عامل‬
‫‪ 250‬مگابایت یا بیشتر (‪ 1‬گیگابایت یا بیشتر توصیه می شود)‬
‫رم‬
‫حداقل ‪ 256‬مگابایت ‪RAM‬‬
‫(‪ 512‬مگابایت و باالتر توصیه می شود)‬
‫ظرفیت هارد دیسک‬
‫حداقل ‪ 110‬مگابایت‬
‫موارد دیگر‬
‫پورت ‪ ،USB‬درایو سی دی‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫موارد دیگر‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫•درایو سی دی‬
‫•نمایشگر ‪ 1024 X 768‬پیکسل سازگار با نمایش رنگی ‪16‬‬
‫بیتی (‪ 1280 X 1024‬پیکسل‪ ،‬صفحه نمایش رنگی ‪ 32‬بیتی‬
‫توصیه می شود)‬
‫•پورت ‪USB 2.0‬‬
‫•‪ nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT‬يا باالتر‪/‬سری ‬
‫‪ ATI X1600‬يا باالتر‬
‫•‪ Microsoft DirectX 9.0c‬يا باالتر‬
‫* یک نسه ‪ 32‬بیتی از ‪ iLauncher‬نصب خواهد شد—حتی در نسخه های ‪ 64‬بیتی‬
‫‪ Windows Vista ،Windows XP‬و ‪.Windows 7‬‬
‫اگر از سیستم عامل مکینتاش استفاده می کنید‪ ،‬فقط به روز رسانی نرم افزار داخلی وجود دارد‪.‬‬
‫اجرای ‪iLauncher‬‬
‫در رایانه خود‪( Start ،‬شروع) ← ‪( All Programs‬همه برنامه ها) ←‬
‫‪ Samsung iLauncher ← iLauncher ← Samsung‬را انتخاب کنید‪.‬‬
‫یا روی ‪( Applications‬برنامه های کاربردی) ← ‪← Samsung‬‬
‫‪ ← iLauncher‬در رایانه دارای سیستم عامل ‪ Mac‬کلیک کنید‪.‬‬
‫شیاریو‪/‬شخپ ‪118‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Multimedia Viewer‬‬
‫‪ Multimedia Viewer‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ،Samsung iLauncher‬ﺭﻭی ‪ Multimedia Viewer‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ Multimedia Viewer‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪) MP4 :‬ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‪ ،H.264 :‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪(MJPEG) AVI ،(WMV 7/8/9) WMV ،(AAC :‬‬‫ ﻋﮑﺲ‪MPO ،TIFF ،PNG ،BMP ،GIF ،JPG :‬‬‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﻭﺍﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪6 5 4‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪9 8‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫!‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١١٩‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪/‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪/‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‪/‬ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫!‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺑﻌﺪی ﻭ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪7 6 54‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١٢٠‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Samsung RAW Converter‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ،Samsung iLauncher‬ﺭﻭی ‪ Firmware Upgrade‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ‪ JPEG‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ‪ JPEG‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪ Samsung RAW Converter‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ ،‬ﺗﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪PC Auto Backup‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ،Samsung iLauncher‬ﺭﻭی ‪ PC Auto Backup‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ ،PC Auto Backup‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪ ١۴١‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ‪Samsung RAW Converter‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪) Start ،‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ( ← ‪) All Programs‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ( ←‬
‫‪Samsung RAW Converter ← Samsung RAW Converter‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ‪Samsung RAW Converter‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ‪ Samsung RAW Converter‬ﺭﻭی ‪) Help‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ( ← ‪) Open software manual‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ(‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪/‬ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ RAW‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ Samsung RAW Converter‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫‪ JPEG‬ﻭ ‪ TIFF‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪) File‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ( ← ‪) Open file‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪،‬‬
‫▲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ p‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪,٨=f :‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ١/١۵ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪،‬‬
‫‪١٠٠=ISO‬‬
‫▲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻐﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫▲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١٢٣‬‬
‫▲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪) File‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ( ← ‪) Open file‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻐﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫▲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ p‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪,٨=f :‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ١/١۵ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪،‬‬
‫‪١٠٠=ISO‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١٢۴‬‬
‫▲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻫﺎی ‪JPEG/TIFF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪) File‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ( ← ‪) Open file‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪) File‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ( ← ‪One scene development‬‬
‫)ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪﺍی( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )‪ JPEG‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (TIFF‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫‪) Development‬ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١٢۵‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ )‪ WLAN‬ﻫﺎ( ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻭ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ … ‪١٢٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﺑﺮی ………… ‪١۴٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪١٢٧ ………………………… WLAN‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Auto Backup‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ……………………………………………… ‪١۴١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬
‫……………………… ‪١٢٩‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ …………………… ‪١٢٩‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ‪ Auto Backup‬ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ …………………………… ‪١۴١‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ………… ‪١۴١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻫﺎﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ……………………………………………… ‪١٣٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍی ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪١۴٣ ……………………………… TV Link‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ …………… ‪١٣۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ …………… ‪١۴۵‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ …………………………… ‪١٣۵‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪۶۴١ ………… (WOL) Wake on LAN‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ………………………………… ‪١٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫…………… ‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ………………………… ‪١٣۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ……………………… ‪١٣٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ …………………………… ‪١٣٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ …………………… ‪١٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻭ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ )‪ (AP‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪WLAN‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ w‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪WPS AP‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ AP‬ﺍﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]‪ AP ،[t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ AP‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ AP‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ‪ AP‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ‪ AP‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪AP‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪Samsung 1‬‬
‫‪Samsung 2‬‬
‫‪Samsung 3‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ WPS‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫• ‪ WPS‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ WPS AP‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ‪ AP‬ﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٢٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ‪ AP‬ﺍﻳﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ‪ WLAN‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ "ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٣٠‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ "ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٢٩‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ‪ AP‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ‪ AP‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ ،WPS‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﭘﻴﻦ ‪ WPS‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ AP‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ WPS‬ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ WPS‬ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ AP‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ AP‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ ،WPS‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻭ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪IP‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ ،AP‬ﻳﮏ ‪ AP‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ ،AP‬ﻳﮏ ‪ AP‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ ← IP‬ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺍﺯ ﻫﻮﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰﻧﮕﺎﺭی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﮔﺬﺭﻭﺍژﻩ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪IP‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻦ ‪WPS‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺣﺮﺍﺯ ﻫﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻧﮕﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ IP‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪IP‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ IP‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Subnet mask‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Gateway‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ DNS‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Subnet Mask‬‬
‫‪Gateway‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ‪DNS‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻭ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ‪ AP‬ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻭﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﺑﺮی‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]‪[o‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[m‬‬
‫]‪[l‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫]‪ [t/F/c/D‬ﻳﮏ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺁﻳﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎی ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ]‪ [l‬ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﭙﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﻮﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺍﻃﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ AP‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭ ‪ AP‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ AP‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﭘﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺣﺮﺍﺯ ﻫﻮﻳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ‪ ،WLAN‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺣﺮﺍﺯ ﻫﻮﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ‪ WLAN‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻨﻤﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﮏ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ WLAN‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ AP‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﻕ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٢٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻭ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ‪ AP‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪AP‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ‪ WLAN‬ﻫﺎی ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻫﺎی ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ‪ WLAN‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ ،AP‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭی ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﭙﺮﻫﻴﺰﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﺮﻕ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ WLAN‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪ WLAN‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﮐﺸﻮﺭی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ‪ DHCP‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ autoip. txt‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ IP‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ 3D‬ﻭ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎی‬
‫ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﯽ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ]‪ [t/F/c/D‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡﻡ ﺷﺪﺪ‬
‫ﺍ ﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺠﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻐﻮ‬
‫‪Backspace‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٣٠‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،ABC‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﯽ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ ".com‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻭ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ABC‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎی ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ]‪ [P‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٢٨‬ﮐﺎﺭﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ WLAN‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪ MobileLink‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪ MobileLink‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﻬﺎی ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺳﺮی ‪ Galaxy‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Android 2.2‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Android 2.1‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ Android 2.2‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺩﺭ ‪ Galaxy Tab‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ‪ ٧‬ﻭ ‪ ١٠/١‬ﺍﻳﻨﭽﯽ ﻧﻴﺰ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Android 2.2‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻟﯽ ‪ Samsung‬ﮐﺎﺭﺁﻳﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ Samsung Apps‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Play Store‬ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ w‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪،‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Samsung MobileLink‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻫﺎﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪ ،Remote Viewfinder‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪ Remote Viewfinder‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﻬﺎی ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺳﺮی ‪ Galaxy‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Android 2.2‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Android 2.1‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ Android 2.2‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺩﺭ ‪ Galaxy Tab‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ‪ ٧‬ﻭ ‪ ١٠/١‬ﺍﻳﻨﭽﯽ ﻧﻴﺰ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Android 2.2‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻟﯽ ‪ Samsung‬ﮐﺎﺭﺁﻳﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ Samsung Apps‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Play Store‬ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ w‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪،‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Remote Viewfinder‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺁﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺁﻳﯽ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،Remote Viewfinder‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎی‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻫﺎﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ‪ 640 X 360‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪ ٧‬ﻣﺘﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ Remote Viewfinder‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ ﭘﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬‫ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ‪WLAN‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٣۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ w‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ AP‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫• ﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﻫﺎی ‪ AP‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ Login‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ "ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ"‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٣٠‬‬
‫← ﻳﮏ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻼ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺒﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٣۵‬‬
‫‪ Upload‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ‪ Facebook‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ ← Upload ،‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ‪ ،Facebook‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻈﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ "ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪ 2M‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 2M‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﺮﻭﺍﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺏ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﮔﺬﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫← ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ "ﭘﺨﺶ" ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ]‪ [m‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٣۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ "ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٣٠‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ w‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ AP‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫• ﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﻫﺎی ‪ AP‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٣٧‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ w‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ AP‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪..‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫• ﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﻫﺎی ‪ AP‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ← ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ‪ ۴‬ﺭﻗﻤﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٣٨‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ w‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ AP‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫• ﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﻫﺎی ‪ AP‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ‪ ۴‬ﺭﻗﻤﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ۴‬ﺭﻗﻤﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ "ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٣٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ w‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ AP‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫• ﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﻫﺎی ‪ AP‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪ Next‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Send‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻼ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٣٧‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‪،‬‬
‫← ﻳﮏ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٣٩‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ ﺁﻣﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺮﺯﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪ 2M‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 2M‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﺮﻭﺍﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫← ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪ ،[m‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﺑﺮی‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ SkyDrive‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ‪ Microsoft‬ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ w‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ SkyDrive‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ OK ،‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ‪ AP‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪WLAN‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫• ﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﻫﺎی ‪ AP‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﻭ ﮔﺬﺭﻭﺍژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ "ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ"‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٣٠‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ‪ SkyDrive‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ "ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ"‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٢٩‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪ Upload‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ "ﭘﺨﺶ" ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ]‪ ،[m‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫← ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﺑﺮی‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﺑﺮی‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻋﻜﺴﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ‪ SkyDrive‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ‪ 2M‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١۴٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Auto Backup‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪ Auto Backup‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ‪ Auto Backup‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ iLauncher‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١١٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Auto Backup‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺩﻭﮐﻠﻴﮏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Auto Backup‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﮑﻤﻴﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺳﯽ‪-‬ﺩی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١۴١‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ w‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﮔﻴﺮی ← ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﮐﺎﺭ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﮔﻴﺮی‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻐﻮ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺗﮑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻇﺮﻑ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻴﺮی‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻟﻐﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Auto Backup‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ )‪ Wake on LAN (WOL‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١۴۶‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ‪ WLAN ،AP‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﺮﻭﺍﻝ ‪ Windows‬ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﺮﻭﺍﻝ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ ۴٨‬ﮐﺎﺭﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(JPG‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١۴٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪TV Link‬‬
‫‪ TV Link‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ AP‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭی‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ w‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ AP‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫• ﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﻫﺎی ‪ AP‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ AP‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭﺍﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ A/V‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪AP‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١۴٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪TV Link‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ‪ AP‬ﻓﺮﻕ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻬﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ TV Link‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﮑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻤﯽ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی(‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﺜ ً‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻗﺪﺭی ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١۴۴‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ "‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ" ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ]‪ ،[m‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫← ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻳﮏ ﺗﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ ،[o‬ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‪ Next ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١۴۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻋﻜﺴﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Wi-Fi Direct‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪(WOL) Wake on LAN‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪ ،WOL‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻃﯽ ‪ ۵‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﻣﻴﺰی ‪Samsung‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ All-in-One‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ BIOS‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺁﺳﻴﺒﻬﺎی ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ BIOS‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪) Start‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ( ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪Control Panel‬‬
‫)ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪) Local Area‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ( ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫‪) Properties‬ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪) Configure‬ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﺮﺩﻥ(‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪) Power manage‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺒﺖ ﺑﺮﻕ( ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ←‬
‫‪Allow this device to wake the computer‬‬
‫)ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ OK‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪:Windows 7‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪) Network and Internet‬ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ( ←‬
‫‪) Network and Sharing Center‬ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬
‫ﮔﺬﺍﺭی( ← ‪) Change adapter settings‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪:Windows Vista‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪) Network and Internet‬ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ( ←‬
‫‪) Network and Sharing Center‬ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬
‫ﮔﺬﺍﺭی( ← ‪) Manage network connections‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ( ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪:Windows XP‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪Network and Internet Connection‬‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ( ← ‪Network Connection‬‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ( ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١۴۶‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫←‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪(WOL) Wake on LAN‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ F2‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪:Windows Vista‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪) Network and Internet‬ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ( ←‬
‫‪) Network and Sharing Center‬ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬
‫ﮔﺬﺍﺭی( ← ‪) Manage network connections‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ( ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪:Windows XP‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪Network and Internet Connection‬‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ( ← ‪Network Connection‬‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ( ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪ BIOS‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪) Advanced‬ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ(‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ←‬
‫‪) Power management Setup‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﻕ( ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪) Resume on PME‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﮔﻴﺮی ‪Enabled ← (PME‬‬
‫)ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ F10‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪) Start‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ( ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪Control Panel‬‬
‫)ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪:Windows 7‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪) Network and Internet‬ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ( ←‬
‫‪) Network and Sharing Center‬ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬
‫ﮔﺬﺍﺭی( ← ‪) Change adapter settings‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١۴٧‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪) Advanced‬ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ( ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی‬
‫‪ WOL‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺁﺗﺶ )‪ (Firewall‬ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ ،WOL‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻳﮏ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪ LAN‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﻭی ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ LAN‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪-‬ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ -‬ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ WOL‬ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ Enable PME ،Wake on LAN :‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ Enable ،Magic packet :‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ………………………………………………… ‪١۴٩‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ …………………………………… ‪١۴٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ …………………………………… ‪١۵٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﭙﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← n‬ﻳﮏ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪AF‬ﺻﺪﺍی‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪١۴٩‬‬
‫]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﮐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ*‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ(‬
‫• ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‬
‫• ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ*(‬
‫• ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ*(‬
‫• ﺻﺪﺍی‪ :AF‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ*(‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮی ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ,‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ*(‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻤﮏ ﮐﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪ ،2 X 2 ،3 X 3 ،‬ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺏ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ*‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ 1 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ*‪ 3 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ ۶٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ*(‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ‬
‫]‪ [POWER‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ‪ ۶٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ MAC‬ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪١۵٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺳﮑﻮﻧﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺳﻔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﺎﻣﺖ*‪ ،‬ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ(‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺭﻭﺯ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ*‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺯ(‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ 0001‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺮی*‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫• ﻧﻮﻉ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ 12‬ﺳﺎﻋﺘﯽ*‪ 24 ،‬ﺳﺎﻋﺘﯽ(‬
‫• ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• )ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫• ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎی ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﭼﺎپ ﻧﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪١۵١‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‪ 100PHOTO ،‬ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻴﺶ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،SAM_0001 ،‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ‪ SAM_0001‬ﺗﺎ‬
‫‪ SAM_9999‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ (SAM_0999~SAM_0001)100PHOTO‬ﺗﺎ‬
‫‪(SAM_9999~SAM_9000)999PHOTO‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩ‪ ١٠٠٠ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )‪ ،(DCF‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺪﺍً ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﯽ ﮐﺎﺭی‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ١ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ٣ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ*‪ ۵ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ١٠ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ(‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫)ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪(Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ‪ WLAN‬ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪ [t‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪،Remote Viewfinder ،*MobileLink‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺮ‪،‬‬
‫‪(TV Link ،Auto Backup‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻤﮏ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ*(‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫‪Anynet+‬‬
‫)‪(HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪١۵٢‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺭک‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺑﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺧﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯﺭﺍﻩﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ‪ HDTV‬ﮐﻪ )‪ Anynet+(CEC‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ‪HDTV‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻭﺷﻦ*‪ :‬ﺩﺭﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ HDTV‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HDTV‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪/480p ،720p ،*1080i :NTSC) .‬‬
‫‪(576p ،720p ،*1080i :PAL‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ HDTV‬ﺍﺯ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪HDTV ،‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ‪ 480p‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 576p‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻭ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :NTSC‬ﺍﻳﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺪﻩ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﮑﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ژﺍﭘﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﺮﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﮑﺰﻳﮏ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫• ‪) PAL‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ‪ BDGHI‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ(‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﮋﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﭼﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻧﻤﺎﺭک‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﮕﻠﺴﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻼﻧﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﻧﺴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﻮﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻟﺰی‪ ،‬ﻫﻠﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻠﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻭژ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﮕﺎﭘﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﭙﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺋﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺋﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻠﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻮﺯﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪١۵٣‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﺴﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ …………………………………………………… ‪١۵۵‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ …………………………………………… ‪١۵٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫………………………………………… ‪١۵٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ …………………………………… ‪١۵٨‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ …………………………………… ‪١۶٠‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ……………………………………………… ‪١۶٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ………………………………… ‪١۶٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ………………………………… ‪١۶٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ……………………… ‪١۶٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻫﺎﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫…………………………………… ‪١۶٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ………………………………………… ‪١۶٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ……………………………………………… ‪١۶٩‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ …………………………………… ‪١٧٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ……………………………………………… ‪١٧٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ …………………………………………… ‪١٧٨‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻣﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﻤﯽ ………………………………… ‪١٨۴‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ………………………………………………………… ‪١٨۶‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ ،SDHC ،SD‬ﻳﺎ ‪ SDXC‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪DCF Full Error‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ← ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١۵١‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ TV Link‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ FAT‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ TV Link‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪TV Link‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ ،SDHC ،SD‬ﻳﺎ ‪SDXC‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻌﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻌﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۵۵‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻏﻴﺮﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪ TV Link‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻌﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ TV Link‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻼﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۵۶‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺧﺸﮏ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﺩﻭﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺑُﺮﺱ ﺩﻣﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺗﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﻨﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﮑﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻭی ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺱ ﺩﻣﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۵٧‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﻮﺍی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﮔﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻧﺎﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﺴﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺎﺕ ﺧﺸﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺪی ﻧﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺮ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﮐﺜﻴﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﺟﺰﺍی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺣﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﻧﻔﺘﺎﻟﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺷﻦ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺿﺪ ﺁﺏ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺧﻴﺲ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻬﺎی ﺧﻴﺲ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۵٨‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ژﻝ ﺳﻴﻠﻴﮑﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﺖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﭙﻮﺳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺪی ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻟﻨﺰ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻇﺮﻳﻔﯽ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﺏ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی‬
‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻧﺰﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﺳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﻴﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی‬
‫ﺷﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﺧﺶ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﺯﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺟﺎﻕ ﻣﺎﻳﮑﺮﻭﻭﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺎﻕ ﮔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﮔﺮﻣﺎی‬
‫ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۵٩‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻭ ﺧﺮﺍﺷﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺮﺯ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﮑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮی ﺑﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎی ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎی ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻠﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺭﺵ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺰﻣﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﺭﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﭘﺰﺷﮏ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬
‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪٢ SD‬‬
‫ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺘﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ )‪،SD (Secure Digital‬‬
‫)‪،SDHC (Secure Digital High Capacity‬‬
‫)‪،SDXC (Secure Digital eXtended Capacity‬‬
‫‪ ،microSDHC ،microSD‬ﻳﺎ ‪ microSDXC‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻳﻴﭻ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ )ﺟﻠﻮ(‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﻳﻴﭻ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ ،SDHC ،SD‬ﻳﺎ ‪ SDXC‬ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻳﻴﭻ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۶٠‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫‪٢٧٧‬‬
‫‪٣١٣‬‬
‫‪۵٠٣‬‬
‫‪٢۵۴‬‬
‫‪٣۴٩‬‬
‫‪۵۵٨‬‬
‫‪٢٨۶‬‬
‫‪٣٩٢‬‬
‫‪۶٢٣‬‬
‫‪٣٣۵‬‬
‫‪۴۵٧‬‬
‫‪٧٢١‬‬
‫‪٣٣٣‬‬
‫‪۴۵۶‬‬
‫‪٧١٩‬‬
‫‪۵١٢‬‬
‫‪۶٩١‬‬
‫‪١٠۶٠‬‬
‫‪٨١٩‬‬
‫‪١٠٨١‬‬
‫‪١۵٨٨‬‬
‫‪١٠٩۵‬‬
‫‪١۴١٨‬‬
‫‪٢٠٠٩‬‬
‫‪٢١۶۵‬‬
‫‪٢۶١٠‬‬
‫‪٣٢٨۴‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫‪RAW‬‬
‫‪+ RAW‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫‪+ RAW‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫‪+ RAW‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫‪۵١‬‬
‫‪۵٩‬‬
‫‪۶٩‬‬
‫‪٧۴‬‬
‫‪۵۴‬‬
‫‪۶١‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫‪٧۶‬‬
‫‪۵٧‬‬
‫‪۶۴‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫‪۶٠‬‬
‫‪۶٧‬‬
‫‪٧۵‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫‪۶٠‬‬
‫‪۶٧‬‬
‫‪٧۵‬‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫‪۶٩‬‬
‫‪٧۴‬‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫‪٨۵‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫‪٨۴‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫‪1920 X 1080‬‬
‫‪1280 X 720‬‬
‫‪640 X 480‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬
‫ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬
‫‪640 X 480‬‬
‫‪384 X 288‬‬
‫‪192 X 144‬‬
‫‪ ۴٨٠‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ ٢۴٠‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫''‪١٩' ٠۵‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫''‪٢٩' ٣٨‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫''‪۵٧' ١۶‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫''‪٧١۶' ۵٠‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫''‪٢۴' ۵٢‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫''‪٣٢' ۴٩‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫''‪٢۶' ٠٢‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫* ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۶١‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﻻ )ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‪ ٣٢/‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ١٠۴‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻢ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎی ﻗﻮی ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺧﻮﺭﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۶٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﻮﺩﮔﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﺜﻴﻒ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﻮﺩﮔﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﻤﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﮥ‬
‫ﺳﺎﮐﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﺎﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺳﯽ ﺩی‪/‬ﺩی ﻭی ﺩی ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫‪SLB-10A‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ‬
‫‪ ١٠٣٠‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬
‫‪ ٣/٧‬ﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ*‬
‫)ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ٢۴٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﺴﺖ )ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣ ً‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،p‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺧﻮﺏ‪ OIS ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪/‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ٢۶٠‬ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫* ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪ ٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺍﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ 30‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎی ‪ Samsung‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۶٣‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ "ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ" ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻓﻠﺰی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ +‬ﻭ ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮک ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫)ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‪ ٣٢/‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‪١٠۴/‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﺗﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮی ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮک ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‪ ٣٢/‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﻋﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۶۴‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺗﺶ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮک ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﯽ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺮژی ﺑﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺧﻨﮏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻢ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺭﻳﺨﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺗﺶ ﻧﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﺯﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺟﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻳﮑﺮﻭﻭﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺎﺏ ‪ USB‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ USB‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺑﺮﻕ‬‫)‪ ۵‬ﻭﻟﺖ‪ ۵٠٠ ،‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ( ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۶۵‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﺑﯽ ﺩﻗﺘﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮگ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺷﮑﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩی‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻡ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺑﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺟﺎﻕ ﻣﺎﻳﮑﺮﻭﻭﻳﻮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﻮﻧﺎ ﻭ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺧﺘﺨﻮﺍﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﭘﺘﻮﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍی ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻓﻠﺰی‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺒﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۶۶‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺗﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻫﺎی ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ‪ ۶٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫)‪ ١۴٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﮔﺮﻣﺎی ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺗﺶ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻫﻨﻤﻮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺗﺶ ﻧﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﻭ ﻓﺪﺭﺍﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻓﻊ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻫﻨﻤﻮﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻔﺸﮏ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﮐﺶ ﮐﻔﺸﮏ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻔﺸﮏ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻔﺸﮏ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﮐﺶ‬
‫ﮐﻔﺸﮏ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻔﺸﮏ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪SEF42A :‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۶٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻫﺎﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻫﺎﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﮐﺴﺐ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﻫﺎﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻫﺎﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۶٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺪﮐﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﺩﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮﺩ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮﺩ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← n‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ← ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ‬
‫]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۶٩‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻠﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺪﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٢٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١۵٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫)ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‪ ٣٢/‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻴﺐ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺯﻭﺩ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﻡ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮی ﺑﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﻟﻐﺰﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺁﺯﺍﺩﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫• ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﻭی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶٩‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٧٠‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﮐﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪).‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١۵١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺏ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺍﻳﯽ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ” ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ “ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١۶٢‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ )ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪DCF‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﯽ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧٢‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١۵٧‬‬
‫• ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٧۴‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨۴‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶٩‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧١‬‬
‫• ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶٩‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧١‬‬
‫• ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨٢‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪A/V‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٧١‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﮐﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪Multimedia‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ Viewer‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ iLauncher‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١١٧‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ iLauncher‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ‪) Start‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ( ←‬
‫‪) All Programs‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ( ←‬
‫‪ iLauncher‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫‪← iLauncher ← Samsung‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ Samsung iLauncher‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪) Applications‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی( ←‬
‫‪ iLauncher ← Samsung‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Mac‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ SDXC‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ SDXC‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪exFAT‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ exFAT‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ SDXC‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪exFAT‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫‪ SDXC‬ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫‪ SDXC‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،Windows XP‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ exFAT‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ‪ Microsoft‬ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪ DPOF‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ‪ DPOF‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪RAW‬‬
‫‪ RAW‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪ [L‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٧٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫‪) ''١/١/٧‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ٩/٣٣‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ( ‪BSI CMOS‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩﺍ ‪ ١٢/۴‬ﻣﮕﺎ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻞ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩﺍ ‪ ١٢/٧۶‬ﻣﮕﺎ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ‪ Schneider-KREUZNACH‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ=‬
‫‪ ۵/٢‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٧/٢‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ) ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣۵‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮی‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٢۴‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٨٠‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮی(‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪-F‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫‪) F1.4‬ﻭﺍﻳﺪ( ﺗﺎ ‪) F2.7‬ﺗﻠﻪ(‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ‪ND‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ١/٠ :‬ﺗﺎ ‪X۴/٠‬‬
‫)ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،X١/٣٣ :‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی‪(X٣/٣ :‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ‬
‫‪ ٧/۶) "٣/٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ( ‪ ۶١۴ ،VGA‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪،(PenTile‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ‪) TTL‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻣﺮﮐﺰی‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪ ،AF‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪ ،(AF‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﻢ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﯽﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﯽﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ )ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ(‬
‫‪ ۴٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﯽﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺷﺐ‬
‫‪AMOLED‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻳﺪ )‪(W‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻪ )‪(T‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﯽﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ۴٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ ۴٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﯽﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ۴٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﯽﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫‪ F1.4‬ﺗﺎ ‪) F3.8‬ﻭﺍﻳﺪ(‬
‫‪ F3.9‬ﺗﺎ ‪) F7.7‬ﻭﺍﻳﺪ(‬
‫‪ ١/٨‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١/٢٠٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١/٢٠٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١/٢٠٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١/٢٠٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١/٨‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١/۴٠٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١/۴٠٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١/۴٠٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١/۴٠٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫‪ AE‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪ ،AE‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ‪،AE‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﮐﺰی‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪) ±٢EV‬ﮔﺎﻡ ‪(١⁄٣ EV‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٧٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪،ISO 400 ،ISO 200 ،ISO 100 ،ISO 80 ،‬‬
‫‪،*ISO 6400 ،ISO 3200 ،ISO 1600 ،ISO 800‬‬
‫‪*ISO 12800‬‬
‫* ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫• ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺩی‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻧﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﺡ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻼﺳﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﺷﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺎﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭی‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫• ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮی ﻫﻨﺮی‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺩی‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،1‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،2‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪،3‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،4‬ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﺡ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻼﺳﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩ‬
‫• ﻭﺳﻴﻊ‪ ٠/٩ :‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٧/٨‬ﻣﺘﺮ )‪(ISO Auto‬‬
‫• ﺗﻠﻪ‪ ٠/٨ :‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴/١‬ﻣﺘﺮ )‪(ISO Auto‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪) ±١EV‬ﮔﺎﻡ ‪(١/٢ EV‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ۴‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ‬
‫ﺭﻳﺰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪] DUAL IS‬ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ + (OIS‬ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪[(DIS‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺮی‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪،H-‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ ،L-‬ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ‪ ٧‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﮐﻬﺮﺑﺎﻳﯽ‪/‬ﺁﺑﯽ‪/‬ﺳﺒﺰ‪/‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٧۴‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ )ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ‪ ،‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺷﺐ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ‪ ،‬ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻏﺮﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﺎﺯی‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﺷﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﮑﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﮑﻦ‬
‫)ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ(‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﮑﻦ )ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ((‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫)ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﻃﻠﻮﻉ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ‪،(3D‬‬
‫‪) Magic Plus‬ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪،Split‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮی ﻫﻨﺮی‪(HDR ،‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ‪ :‬ﺗﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ )ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪ ،10‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪،5‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪ ،(3‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ )‪ ،(AE ،WB‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪ ،10‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ‪ :ND‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ )ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﺑﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺒﺰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ‪ ،‬ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪Magic Plus ،‬‬
‫)ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ‪) MP4 (H.264) :‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ٢٠ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪،640 X 480 ،1280 X 720 ،1920 X 1080 :‬‬
‫‪320 X 240‬‬
‫ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‪ :‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪،(192 X 144) 480‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪ ،(384 X 288) 240‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪120‬‬
‫)‪(640 X 480‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﺪﻩ‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ‪ ،Sound Alive‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ‪،Sound Alive‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪Dual IS ،OIS ،‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫• ﻧﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﺗﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﭗ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ*‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺧﻼﻕ‬
‫* ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻫﻔﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫• ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺭﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫• ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ )ﻋﺎﺩی‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻧﺮﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﺡ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻼﺳﻴﮏ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺎﺷﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭی‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﻡ(‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺧﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺵ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﮥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی(‪:‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ ١) SD‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﯽ(‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪) SDHC‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣٢‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﯽ(‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪) SDXC‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۶۴‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﯽ(‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪DPOF 1.1 ،EXIF 2.21 ،JPEG (DCF) :‬‬
‫• ﮐﻠﻴﭗ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪) MP4 :‬ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ‪،MPEG-4.AVC/H.264 :‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ‪(AAC :‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٧۵‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ ٢‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪ :SD‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫‪4000 X 3000‬‬
‫‪٢٧٧‬‬
‫‪٣١٣‬‬
‫‪۵٠٣‬‬
‫‪ ،Remote Viewfinder ،Mobile Link‬ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺮ‪،‬‬
‫‪ Wi-Fi ،TV Link ،Auto Backup‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫‪4000 X 2672‬‬
‫‪٢۵۴‬‬
‫‪٣۴٩‬‬
‫‪۵۵٨‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫‪4000 X 2248‬‬
‫‪٢٨۶‬‬
‫‪٣٩٢‬‬
‫‪۶٢٣‬‬
‫‪3264 X 2448‬‬
‫‪2832 X 2832‬‬
‫‪٣٣۵‬‬
‫‪٣٣٣‬‬
‫‪۴۵٧‬‬
‫‪۴۵۶‬‬
‫‪٧٢١‬‬
‫‪٧١٩‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫‪USB 2.0‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‪/‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ )ﻣﻮﻧﻮ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ )ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‬
‫‪2592 X 1944‬‬
‫‪۵١٢‬‬
‫‪۶٩١‬‬
‫‪١٠۶٠‬‬
‫‪1984 X 1488‬‬
‫‪٨١٩‬‬
‫‪١٠٨١‬‬
‫‪١۵٨٨‬‬
‫‪1920 X 1080‬‬
‫‪١٠٩۵‬‬
‫‪١۴١٨‬‬
‫‪٢٠٠٩‬‬
‫‪1024 X 768‬‬
‫‪٢١۶۵‬‬
‫‪٢۶١٠‬‬
‫‪٣٢٨۴‬‬
‫‪RAW + RAW + RAW‬‬
‫‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫‪ +‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫• ‪) PAL ،NTSC :A/V‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ(‬
‫• ‪) PAL ،NTSC :HDMI 1.4‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ(‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫‪4000 X 3000‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫‪۵١‬‬
‫‪۵٩‬‬
‫‪۶٩‬‬
‫‪4000 X 2672‬‬
‫‪٧۴‬‬
‫‪۵۴‬‬
‫‪۶١‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫‪4000 X 2248‬‬
‫‪٧۶‬‬
‫‪۵٧‬‬
‫‪۶۴‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫‪3264 X 2448‬‬
‫‪2832 X 2832‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫‪۶٠‬‬
‫‪۶٠‬‬
‫‪۶٧‬‬
‫‪۶٧‬‬
‫‪٧۵‬‬
‫‪٧۵‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2592 X 1944‬‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫‪۶٩‬‬
‫‪٧۴‬‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫‪1984 X 1488‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫‪٨۵‬‬
‫‪1920 X 1080‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫‪٨۴‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫‪1024 X 768‬‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻢ‪-‬ﻳﻮﻥ )‪ ١٠٣٠ ،SLB-10A‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(‬
‫‪ ٧) Micro USB‬ﭘﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ Samsung‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٧۶‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﻤﻖ ‪ X‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ X‬ﻋﺮﺽ(‬
‫‪ ١١٢/١ X ۶٢/۴ X ٢٧/۵۵‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺁﻣﺪﮔﯽ ﻫﺎ(‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ ٢٨۶‬ﮔﺮﻡ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ(‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩی‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪C °۴٠‬‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩی‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺗﺎ ‪٪ ٨۵‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫‪Samsung RAW Converter ،iLauncher‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٧٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﮐﺮﻭﺷﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‬
‫‪) DCF‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ ﻭ ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ژﺍﭘﻦ )‪ (JEITA‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ‬
‫‪) AF‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )ﺗﺎﺭی(‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ DIS‬ﻳﺎ ‪ OIS‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺧﻮﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎی ﺯﻭﻡ )ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DPOF‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺒﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭼﺎپ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ .‬ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ ،DPOF‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭ ﭼﺎپ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٧٨‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ‪EV‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻟﻨﺰ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ(‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎی ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺮ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎی ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺮ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺍﺣﺪی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ ،EV ١٫٠-‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺍﺣﺪی ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ‪ EV ١٫٠‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫‪) EV‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﮑﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ )ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ( ﻭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫)ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ( ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Exif‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﻪ(‬
‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ )‪ (JEIDA‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪H.264/MPEG-4‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻭﻳﺪﺉ ﻳﻮی ﺑﺲ ﺍﻳﺮ ﻑ ﺷﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺕ ﺳﻮﻁ ﺍﺱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ ISO-IEC‬ﻭ ‪ ITU-T‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍ ﺗﺲ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺪک ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻴﺎﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻳﻒ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺎﻩ ی ﺏ ﺍﮐﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻴﺪﺭ ﻧﺮﺥ ﺏ ﻳﻴﺎپ ﺗﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺕ ﺳﻮﻁ ‪ (JVT) Joint Video Team‬ﺕ ﺳﻮﻋﻪ ﻓﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻪ ﺍ ﺗﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﮑﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻭی ﻓﺘﻮﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻓﺘﻮﺳﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪) CCD :‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ( ﻭ ‪CMOS‬‬
‫)ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺎی ﻣﮑﻤﻞ ﺍﮐﺴﻴﺪ ﻓﻠﺰی(‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٧٩‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ(‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎﺭی ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ‬
‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ JPEG) MJPEG‬ﻣﺘﺤﺮک(‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) JPEG‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﺸﺘﺮک ﮐﺎﺭﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ(‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻓﺖ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺣﺠﻢ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﻓﺖ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) LCD‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮐﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ CCFL‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ LED‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) MPO‬ﺷﯽ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی(‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ MPO‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ MPO‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﺎی ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎی ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی ﺍﺭﺍﻳﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ )ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ(‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﺎی‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ )ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ )‪(١:١‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺯﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) OIS‬ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ‪ ،‬ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻭ ﺗﮑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺧﻨﺜﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺖ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٨٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮی‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﺥ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻤﺘﺮی ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎی )ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ( ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﻠﺐ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮی ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی‬
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻠﻬﺎی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮی ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ(‬
‫ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺰ ﻭ ﺁﺑﯽ(‪ .‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺸﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭ ﭼﻮﻥ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻬﻤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻤﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺗﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﯽ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻭﻣﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭی ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺰﻝ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٨١‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫)ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻭﺭی ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ(‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺯﺍﻳﺪ(‬
‫)ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻭﺭی ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ(‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺟﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ‪ Hg، Cd‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Pb‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺣﺎﻭی ﺟﻴﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﻣﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺮﺏ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪۶۶/٢٠٠۶‬‬
‫ﮐﻤﻴﺴﻴﻮﻥ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺯﻳﺴﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺁﻥ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‪ ،‬ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪(USB‬‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﮐﺎﺭی ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺯﻳﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺳﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺩﻓﻊ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﻭ ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻳﮕﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻭﺭی‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻔﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﺎﺩی ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ PlanetFirst‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﻬﺪ ‪ Samsung Electronic‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﭘﺬﻳﺮی ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮐﺴﺐ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺯﻳﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٨٢‬‬
‫‪ELECTRONICS‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻼﻣﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﻄﺒﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺍﮐﻮ )‪ (EC/2009/125‬ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ‪(EC) No‬‬
‫‪ 278/2009‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ‪ :‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ)ﻫﺎ( ‪EX2F :‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻼﻣﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ )ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ( ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ )‪ R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC‬ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫)‪ (EC/2006/95‬ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی ﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ )‪ (EC/2004/108‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪EN 60950-1:2006+A1:2010‬‬
‫‪EN 55024:1998+A1:2001+A2:2003‬‬
‫‪EN 55022:2006+A1 :2007‬‬
‫‪EN 61000-3-2:2006 +A1:2009 +A2:2009‬‬
‫‪EN 61000-3-3:2008‬‬
‫‪EN 300 328 v1.7.1‬‬
‫‪EN 301 489-1 v1.8.1‬‬
‫‪EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1‬‬
‫‪Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab.‬‬
‫‪Blackbushe Business Park‬‬
‫‪Saxony Way, Yateley, Hampshire‬‬
‫‪GU46 6GG, UK‬‬
‫)ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭼﺴﺒﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ CE‬ﺳﺎﻝ ‪(2012‬‬
‫‪ ٢۶‬ژﻭﺋﻦ ‪٢٠١٢‬‬
‫‪ / Joong-Hoon Choi‬ﻣﺪﯾﺮ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﯾﺸﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫)ﻣﺤﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ(‬
‫)ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻀﺎی ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ(‬
‫* ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪EN62311 :2008‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٨٣‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻣﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﻤﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻼﻣﻴﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺸﻮﺭ‬
Samsung Electronics tímto prohlašuje, že tento digitální fotoaparát je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími
.příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES
Cesky
Samsung Electronics erklærer herved, at digitale kameraer overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv
.1999/5/EF
Dansk
Hiermit erklärt Samsung Electronic, dass sich die Digitalkamera in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen
.und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet
Deutsch
Käesolevaga kinnitab Samsung Electronics digitaalkaamera vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud
.direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele
Eesti
Hereby, Samsung Electronics declares that this digital camera is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
.relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC
English
Por medio de la presente Samsung Electronics declara que la cámara digital cumple con los requisitos esenciales y
.cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE
Español
ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ η Samsung Electronics ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ η ψηφιακή φωτογραφική μηχανή ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ
.ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ
Ελληνική
Par la présente Samsung Electronic déclare que l'appareil photo numérique est conforme aux exigences essentielles et
.aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE
Français
Con la presente Samsung Electronicsdichiara che questa fotocamera digitale è conforme ai requisiti essenziali e alle altre
.disposizioni stabilite dalla Direttiva 1999/5/CE
Italiano
Ar šo Samsung Electronics deklarē, ka digitālā kamera atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to
.saistītajiem noteikumiem
Latviski
Šiuo Samsung Electronics deklaruoja, kad šis skaitmeninis fotoaparatas, atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB
.Direktyvos nuostatas
Lietuvių
Hierbij verklaart Samsung Electronics dat de digitale camera in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere
.relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG
Nederlands
١٨۴ ‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻣﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ﺭﺳﻤﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻼﻣﻴﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺸﻮﺭ‬
Hawnhekk, Samsung Electronics, tiddikjara li din il-kamera diġitali hi konformi mar-rekwiżiti essenzjali u ma' dispożizzjonijiet
.rilevanti oħrajn ta' Direttiva 1999/5/KE
Malti
A Samsung Electronics kijelenti, hogy ez a digitális fényképezőgép megfelel az 1999/5/EK irányelv alapvetõ
.követelményeinek és egyéb vonatkozó elõírásainak
Magyar
Niniejszym firma Samsung Electronics oświadcza, że ten aparat cyfrowy jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz
.pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/WE
Polski
Samsung Electronics declara que esta câmera digital está conforme os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da
.Directiva 1999/5/CE
Português
Samsung Electronics izjavlja, da je ta digitalni fotoaparat v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili
.direktive 1999/5/ES
Slovensko
Samsung Electronics týmto vyhlasuje, že tento digitálny fotoaparát spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné
.ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES
Slovensky
Samsung Electronics vakuuttaa täten että tämä digitaalikamera on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä
.koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen
Suomi
Härmed intygar Samsung Electronicsatt dessa digitalkameror står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav
.och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG
Svenska
С настоящото Samsung Electronics декларира, че този цифров фотоапарат е в съответствие със съществените
.изисквания и другите приложими разпоредби на Директива 1999/5/ЕК
Български
Prin prezenta, Samsung Electronics, declară că această cameră foto digitală este în conformitate cu cerinţele esenţiale şi
.alte prevederi relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/CE
Română
Samsung Electronicserklærer herved at dette digitalkameraet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante
.krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF
Norsk
Bu belge ile, Samsung Electronics bu dijital kameranın 1999/5/EC Yönetmeliginin temel gerekliliklerine ve ilgili hükümlerine
.uygun olduğunu beyan eder
Türkiye
Hér með lýsir Samsung Electronics því yfir að þessi stafræna myndavél sé í samræmi við grunnkröfur og önnur ákvæði
.tilskipunar 1999/5/EB
Íslenska
١٨۵ ‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ‪١۵‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ‪١۵٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ‪١۵٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪١١۴ 3D‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪٢۴‬‬
‫‪١١۶ Mac‬‬
‫‪١١٨ Windows‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﭘﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪١١۶ Mac‬‬
‫‪١١٨ Windows‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ‪١٣٧‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﺮﺗﺮﻩ ‪١۴١‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪١۵٣ HDMI‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ‪١۶۴‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪٢٢‬‬
‫پ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎی ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ‪۵٠‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ‪۵٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ‪۵٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪١١٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ‪١۵١ ،٢۴‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ‪١۵٧‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١۵٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪١۵٧‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪١٧ A/V‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪١۵١‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪١٧ USB‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ ‪١۵۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪١۶‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪١٠٩‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٨۶‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ‪٨۴‬‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١١۵‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ‪١۵٢ AF‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪١۵٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪١۶‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ‪١٠٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪Magic Plus‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ‪١۵٠ AF‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ‪۴۵‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪٧١ ISO‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪۴۶‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪۴٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٩۶‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪۶٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ ‪۴٩‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﮐﺮﻭﺷﻪ ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪١٠٩‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۴٩‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺥ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪١۵٣‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ‪١۵٠‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪١۵٠‬‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ‪٣۵‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪١۵٢‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪۴١‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ‪۴٧‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪۴٨‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ‪١۶‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪۵٠ 3D‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ‪٣۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍﺭی ﺯﻭﻡ ‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪٣۶‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪١۶‬‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٢٧‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٨٧‬‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﺮﺗﺮﻩ ‪١۴١‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﺮﺗﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪۶٩‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ ‪۴٩‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪۶٩‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪١۶‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫)‪١١٠ (DPOF‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ‪۶٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪۶٩‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ‪۶٩‬‬
‫ﺷﺪﺕ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ‪۶٩‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪۶٩‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ‪۶٩‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ‪٩٢ ND‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪٩١‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪١٠۵‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪١٠٩‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶٨‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ‪١۵‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﻨﮏ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪١۴٣‬‬
‫ک‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ‪١۶٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﮐﺮﻭﺷﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪۶۶‬‬
‫گ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪٧۶‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ‪٧۶‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪١٧٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ ‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺛﺒﺖ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻐﻮ ‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﺭﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﮑﯽ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪۵٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪۵۵‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵۴ Split‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ ‪۵٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺧﻼﻕ ‪۵٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮی ﻫﻨﺮی ‪۵۶‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪١٠۶‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٨٨‬‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪١١٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ‪١٠۴‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١٧٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ‪١٣٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ‪۴۴‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١۵٧‬‬
‫ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪١٣۵‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ‪١٣۵‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٩۶‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٢۶‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ‪١۵٠‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪١٠٧‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶۵‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ‪١٠۴‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪٨۴‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰی ‪٨۴‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪٨۴‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ‪١۵١‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ‪١٠٧‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺵ ‪١٠۵‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ‪١٠۶‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪١۵٢ Anynet+‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪١١٨ iLauncher‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٨٩‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ‬
‫‪ www.samsung.com‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
Download PDF